Dodge | Avenger 2012 | Owner`s manual | Dodge Avenger 2012 Owner`s manual

Dodge Avenger 2012 Owner`s manual
2012 Avenger
2012
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
12D41-126-AA
905541-Avenger-OM cover.indd 1
First Edition
Avenger
Printed in U.S.A.
3/28/11 5:17 PM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Auto Window Down — If Equipped . . . . . . . 35
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25
▫ Auto Window Up With Anti-Pinch
Protection— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
䡵 Remote Start System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
䡵 Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . 39
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 49
䡵 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Rear Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 60
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 64
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 72
. . . . . . . . . . 83
. . . . . . . . . . 84
. . . . . . . . . . 84
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 57
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place.
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
Vehicle Key
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
occurs, place the shift lever in PARK, rotate the key to
the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If
a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in
the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
NOTE:
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
• If you try to remove the key before you place the shift
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
SENTRY KEY姞
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorsounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
NOTE:
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
• The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the
or unlocked.
ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
• With either front door open, and the key in the
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
ignition, neither the power door locks nor Remote
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are proKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will function.
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
Locking Doors With A Key
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
There is only one external door lock cylinder which is seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
located in the driver’s door.
engine.
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
key forward. For door lock lubrication, refer to “Mainte- ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
During normal operation, after turning the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seconds for a bulb check. If the Vehicle Security Light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle
Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key威 from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key威 has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
key is one which has never been programmed.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at least
three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the
first key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
authorized dealer.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
then turn off.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid Sentry Keys威 by performing the following procedure:
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote • This device must accept any interference that may be
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be proreceived, including interference that may cause undegrammed during this procedure.
sired operation.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk
authorized dealer for details.
for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthorNOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized ized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys- armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid
tems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting release are disabled.
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro- If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an autho- Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first three
rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed. minutes, the horn will sound intermittently, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules part 15 will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is flash. Then the exterior lights will flash for another
15 minutes.
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is
opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the
power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
NOTE:
• During the 16-second arming period, if a door is
opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
• Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the
of the vehicle.
unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch
passenger door trim panel, the trunk release button on
(one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the
the instrument panel, and the HomeLink威/Garage
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be
Door Opener (if equipped).
open or closed), and close all doors.
To Disarm The System
NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers.
or insert a valid Sentry Key威 into the ignition lock
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position.
will flash for 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the
vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have
timed out, the park and taillights flash three times, and
the horn will chirp three times, when unlocking the
vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately NOTE:
30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the • The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects.
ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF
position..
• Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Vehicle Key
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry
system (if equipped) will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are
inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm
system. Opening a door with the system activated will
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
Flash Lights With Lock
The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- removed.
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
the current setting, proceed as follows:
its previous setting.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Custhe vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm
tomer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
system. Opening a door with the system activated will
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.
following procedure:
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
equipped with EVIC. For details, refer to “Electronic • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
following steps:
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transYour Instrument Panel” for further information.
mitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than
To Lock The Doors
10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- holding the LOCK button.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressSound Horn With Lock
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
follows:
its previous setting.
• For vehicles equipped with EVIC, refer to “Electronic NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Opening a door with the alarm activated will cause the NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when
alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due
to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
system.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two Programming Additional Transmitters
times to unlatch the trunk.
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
Using The Panic Alarm
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
contact your authorized dealer for details.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the Transmitter Battery Replacement
headlights turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
will pulse on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
(if equipped) will turn on.
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
distance, check for these two conditions.
engine will remote start:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
• Shift lever in PARK
of a battery is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station • Doors closed
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
• Hood closed
or CB radios.
• Trunk closed
REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Hazard switch off
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Ignition key removed from ignition switch
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto- • RKE PANIC button not pressed
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premaNOTE:
turely:
• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
then shut down 10 seconds later.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• For security, power window operation is disabled To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a will disable the one-time press of the Remote Start button
for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start
third cycle.
request.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release
• Any engine warning lamps come on
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
• Low Fuel Light turns on
equipped). Then insert the key into the ignition switch
• The hood is opened
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
• The brake pedal is pressed
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
inside door handle.
Manual Lock Knob
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger
door panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Auto Unlock On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
abled.
following procedure:
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/
RUN and then back to LOCK four times, ending up in the
LOCK position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
3. Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
doors.
Doors
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Childprogramming.
Protection Door Lock system.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the
rear edge of the door. Insert the tip of the ignition key or
similar flat-bladed object into the lock and rotate approximately one-quarter turn to the lock or unlock position (as
indicated by the stamped icons).
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (UNLOCKED position), roll
down the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
POWER WINDOWS
Child Lock Control
Power Window Switches
The control on the driver’s door has up/down switches
that give you fingertip control of all four power windows.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auto Window Down — If Equipped
The front window controls on the driver and passenger
door trim panels have an Auto-Down feature. These
AUTO Power Window Switch
switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability.
There is a single window control on the front and rear Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
passenger’s door trim panel, which operates the front the window will go down automatically.
and rear passenger door windows. The window controls
To open the window part way, push the window switch
will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the
to the first detent and release it when you want the
ON/RUN or ACC position, and when the accessory
window to stop.
delay feature is active.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch Auto Window Up With Anti-Pinch Protection— If
either in the up or down direction and release the switch. Equipped
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch To cancel the Auto Up movement, operate the switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
cancel this feature.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window the first detent and release it when you want the window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the to stop.
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either door will
NOTE:
cancel this feature. The time for this feature is program• If the window runs into any obstacle during automable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
closure, the anti-pinch protection reverse the window
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Feadirection and then go back down. Remove the obstacle
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
and use the window switch again to close the window.
further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window LOCK button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
When the window is almost closed, there is no
anti-pinch protection. To avoid personal injury, be
sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects
from the window path before closing.
Reset Auto Up
Anytime the vehicle battery goes dead, the Auto Up
function will be disabled. To reactivate the Auto Up
feature, pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
Window Lockout Switch
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
TRUNK RELEASE
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
transmitter to open the trunk from
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
outside the vehicle. From inside the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
vehicle the trunk lid can be released by
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurpressing the TRUNK RELEASE button
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
located on the instrument panel to the
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
left of the steering wheel.
Trunk Release
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
Button
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
NOTE: The shift lever must be in PARK for this switch
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
to operate.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
word “dECK” will display in place of the odometer
display indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer
display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the
trip button is depressed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the Trunk Internal Emergency Release
key out, the word “dECK” will display until the trunk is As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
closed.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
equipped vehicles, the words “Trunk Ajar” will display.
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Some of the most important safety features in your
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
vehicle are the restraint systems:
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
energy during an impact event
positions
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenAutomatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
ger
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
item in a seat
restraint) — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
window
possible.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
wheel
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
infant and child restraint systems. For more information Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
CHildren (LATCH).
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
collision.
their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
buckled up in a rear seat.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or accidents. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even conditions. However, in an accident the belt will lock and
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen being thrown out.
far away from home or on your own street.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in an accident much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in an accident. The belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but
across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
shoulder belt.
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push ANCHORAGE button to release the
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that
anchor point.
fits you best.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Anchorage
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
Driver
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
First Row
N/A
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
Second Row
ALR
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
• N/A — Not Applicable
it is locked in position.
Rear Seat Belts
The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three-point belts
are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passengers on sedans. The center belt is mounted to the rear
shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Center
N/A
ALR
Passenger
ALR
ALR
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
accident. These devices may improve the performance of
the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) — If
Equipped
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
2
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
into the back decorative plastic half.
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
NOTE:
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
AHR In Reset Position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual
notification.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
belt alert) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be the best way to keep the baby safe.
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
the force if there is an accident.
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
Seat Belt Extender
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deacIf a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
tivating BeltAlert威.
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
tender, and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air 12 —
— Knee Bolster
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on the severity and type of
collision.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. If the
vehicle is equipped with SABIC, they are located above
the side windows. The trim covering the side air bags is
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
labeled SRS AIRBAG.
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seatseat position.
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The NOTE:
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Advanced Front Air Bags.
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
and Seat Track Position Sensors
system components:
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
• Air Bag Warning Light
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
• Steering Wheel and Column
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
• Instrument Panel
sensors.
• Knee Impact Bolster
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
used for more severe collisions.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideSide Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Location
impact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy downNOTE:
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subThe ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collirequired for this vehicle.
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or the other hand, depending on the type and location of
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air severe initial deceleration.
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
the severity and type of impact.
type of collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acciORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
away from an inflating air bag.
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruSTART or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnosair bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
•
•
•
•
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
Cut off fuel to the engine.
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
until the ignition key is turned off.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
removed.
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
Unlock the doors automatically.
immediately.
If A Deployment Occurs
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the Maintaining Your Air Bag System
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
WARNING!
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inbe injured if the air bag system is not there to
structions for cleaning.
protect you. Do not modify the components or
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have dewiring, including adding any kind of badges or
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
bags will not be in place to protect you.
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
WARNING!
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac(Continued)
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
child.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward- LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
WARNING!
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
child seats.
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until deployment could cause severe injury or death to
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. infants in this position.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child Older Children And Child Restraints
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward- Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardused rearward-facing by children who have outgrown facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direcold. Children should remain rearward-facing until they tion are for children who are over two years old or who
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your
child restraints:
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to • All passenger seating positions contain automatic
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
locking retractors. However, any seat belt system will
against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and
in a rear seat.
pull it tight if necessary.
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it • In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
weight and height limits.
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure, Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
try a different seating position.
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodatWARNING!
ing LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible,
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outvehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a board positions only. Regardless of the specific type of
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants lower attachment, never install LATCH-compatible child
seats such that two seats share a common lower anchoror seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
age. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child reNOTE:
For additional information, refer to straints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana- LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web- position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHsite for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
compatible, you can only install the child restraints using
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to “Installing The
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage, have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
2
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
of all of the available attachments provided with your System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
child restraint in any vehicle.
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
were provided with the child restraint system.
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
meets the seatback, and are just visible when
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. surfaces.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
behind each rear seating position located in the
your child unattended in the vehicle.
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
window. These tether strap anchorages are under a provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you
plastic cover with this symbol on it.
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward- NOTE:
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
the strap.
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
of the seat cover material. Then, rotate the tether anchorreach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
side of the head restraint.
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor to secure
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint
a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts
to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
instructions.
a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if
you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then
WARNING!
allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For additional
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to information on ALR, refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”
increased head motion and possible injury to the description under “Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Posichild. Use only the anchor positions directly behind tions” section. The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
cinching latch plate.
strap.
First Row
Second Row
Driver
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
Center
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
Passenger
CRS Lock
ALR
ALR
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect the
latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and
insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still
can’t make the child restraint secure, try a different
seating position.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Make sure that:
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the • The child is upright in the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
their back.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriTransporting Pets
mental and should be avoided.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
an accident.
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
(Continued) seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authofor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
rized dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Defroster
Vehicle
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
Seat Belts
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
inoperable.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Floor Mat Safety Information
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
Air Bag Warning Light
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 94
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Adjusting Side View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 96
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 148
▫ Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 159
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 151
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Map/Reading/Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Headlights With Wipers Feature (Available
With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . 157
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 167
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Rear Seat Bottle Holder . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 172
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Glovebox Storage Compartment .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 172
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Ski Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . .
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . 178
. . . . . . . . . 178
. . . . . . . . . 178
. . . . . . . . . 179
. . . . . . . . . 179
. . . . . . . . . 180
. . . . . . . . . 180
. . . . . . . . . 182
. . . . . . . . . 183
. . . . . . . . . 184
. . . . . . . . . 184
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
3
Power Mirror Control
Mirror Directions
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand control to the center position to prevent accidentally
in the direction you want the mirror to move.
moving a mirror.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting Side View Mirrors
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
normal.
inside mirror.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the is activated whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Undervehicle.
standing the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other objects. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al- • or call 1–877–855–8400
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice Com(Uconnect™ Phone
button) that will enable you to
mand
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or andetails.
other prompt.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi• For certain operations, compound commands can be
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
switch), if so equipped.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
• Press the
button to begin.
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button on the radio control head.
“Device Pairing”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
Dial By Saying A Number
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
button to begin.
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile • Press the
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial”.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
priority level between one and seven, with one being
want to call.
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any • For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number • The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
of certain radios.
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
• Press the
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Press the
“Call”.
button to begin.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
person you want to call.
“Phonebook New Entry”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomyou can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previmended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
instead of “Bob”.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- website for supported phones.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
• To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
main menu.
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
start the vehicle.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati- • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
NOTE:
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availwhen the vehicle is not in motion.
able for use.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
deleted or edited.
phone is accessible.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
book.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
entry that you wish to edit.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
phone connection.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
to the main menu.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
button while the
from the list, press the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
“Delete”.
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
Entry” feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
• Press the
button to begin.
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete”.
deleted or edited.
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
button during the playing of the desired name, and
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
say “Call”.
deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language operations at this point.
is deleted.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
number designation you wish to call.
deleted or edited.
• The selected number will be dialed.
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
Phone Call Features
button to begin.
The following features can be accessed through the
• Press the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
button until you hear a single
call, press and hold the
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the
button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
Toggling Between Calls
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
one conference call.
button until you hear a single beep,
press the
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls Call Termination
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
time.
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Conference Call
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
joined into one conference call.
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
“Redial”.
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
was dialed from your mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
Uconnect™ Phone.
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Language Selection
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail- using:
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
the name of the language you wish to switch to
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
English, Espanol, or Francais.
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
the language selection.
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
voice commands will be in that language.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency numNOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phoneMexico.
book is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
Emergency Assistance
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
reachable:
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
area.
number for your area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and say
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
• Press the
button to begin.
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect™ System,
• and have network coverage.
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
• Press the
button to begin.
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
“Towing Assistance”.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the with Automated Systems”.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while number on a pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
service or automated customer service line. Some ser- call and then press the
vices require immediate response selection. In some system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
instances, that may be too quick for use of the say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
Uconnect™ Phone.
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
tones over the phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
NOTE:
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
network configurations. This is normal.
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying
press the
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
use of this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
• Press the
button to begin.
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
one of the following:
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
button
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
and say “Transfer Call”.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
• Press the
button.
with one electronic device at a time.
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
button and
phone being announced, press the
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two secDelete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
button to begin.
• Press the
paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
• Press the
button to begin.
prompts.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You can also press the
button at any time while the • Press the
button and say the “Voice Training,
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
wish to delete.
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
Phone
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be comUconnect™ Phone Tutorial
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
switched off.
Voice Training
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizsystem will adapt to the last trained voice only.
ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this Reset
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
button.
• press the
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
radio mode):
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from • When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
you.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
during a Voice Command period.
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
• low-to-medium blower setting,
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
number combinations may not be supported.
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
compromised with the convertible top down.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down- the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, IncomSend Messages:
ing and Missed Calls.
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
• Press the
button.
your phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Read Messages:
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will • You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
button while the
To send a message, press the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
• Press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
you.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List of Preset Messages:
11. See You in 15 minutes
1. Yes
12. I am on my way
2. No
13. I’ll be late
3. Where are you?
14. Are you there yet?
4. I need more direction.
15. Where are we meeting?
5. L O L
16. Can this wait?
6. Why
17. Bye for now
7. I love you
18. When can we meet
8. Call me
19. Send number to call
9. Call me later
20. Start without me
10. Thanks
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
• Press the
button.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Power-Up
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
will then be given a choice to change it.
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton, listen dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
options, press the Voice Command
set to low.
for the beep, and say your command.
button while the
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Combutton and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
Commands
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
The Voice Command system understands two types of
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
commands. Universal commands are available at all
These commands are universal and can be used from any times. Local commands are available if the supported
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon radio mode is active.
the active application.
Changing the Volume
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
a normal speaking volume.
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Radio AM
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for this mode, you may say the following commands:
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Main Menu
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
menu.
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
Radio FM
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Setup” (to switch to system setup)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
mands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
Memo
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Switch to system setup”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Change to setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Main menu setup” or
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Switch to setup”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Language English”
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Language French”
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
• “Language Spanish”
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Tutorial”
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Voice Training”
Setup
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command
button first and wait for the beep before
following:
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to setup”
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new Power Seats — If Equipped
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use the seat control switch to move
SEATS
the seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Use the seatback control to adjust the angle of the
vehicle.
seatback.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Control
2 — Seat Control
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
backward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
Heated Seats — If Equipped
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
center of the instrument panel (below the climate conNOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
trols).
within two to five minutes.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat to the
desired position. After releasing the adjusting bar, apply
forward and rearward body pressure to be sure the seat
is latched.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster — If
Equipped
A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort
for petite as well as tall drivers. A lever with a ratcheting
mechanism, located on the outboard side of the seat,
raises and lowers it. Total travel is 2.2 in. (56 mm).
3
Manual Seat Height Adjustment Lever
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Seats
The recliner control is on the side of the seat. To recline,
lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position.
Seatback Adjustment
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the The recline handle on the front passenger seat also
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located releases the seatback to fold forward.
on the outboard side of the driver’s seatback. Turn the
control lever downward to increase and upward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.
Seatback Adjustment
Lumbar Support
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel.
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
3
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Push Button
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The rear seat head restraints are fixed and cannot be
(Continued) adjusted. For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops shown in the picture
to fold down either or both seatbacks.
When returning the rear seat back to the upright position,
be sure the seatback is latched.
Folding Rear Seats
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children.
They could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the proper
restraint system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with To open the hood, two latches must be released.
cupholders.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
3
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
Hood Release Lever
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Lift the secondary latch located under the front edge
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
Hood Prop Rod Hole Location
Hood Safety Catch
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the left underside of the hood.
Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod
in its proper location.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
3
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
Multifunction Lever
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third
detent (AUTO), will activate the automatic headlight
system.
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
With the engine running and the multifunction lever in
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and turn
off based on the surrounding light levels.
Headlight Time Delay
There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle
lights for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. To activate the headlight delay, the multifunction lever must be rotated to the off position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Only the headlights will
illuminate during this time. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3
Turn Signal Control
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. defective.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Change Assist
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
The front fog light switch is on the multifunction
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
three times then automatically turn off.
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the multifunction lever.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-topass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
Front Fog Light Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the Lights On Reminder
headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
will turn off the front fog lights.
when the driver’s door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The front turn signal lamps will turn on as Daytime Instrument Panel Dimmer
Running Lights whenever the ignition is ON, the engine Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking brake bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
is released and the shift lever is in any position except and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
PARK.
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will flash when a Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
turn signal is in operation and return to DRL mode when brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.
the turn signal is not operating.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last Map/Reading/Interior Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
the rearview mirror. Each light can be turned on by
pressing the barrel. Press the barrel a second time to turn
the light off. Both of these lights can swivel so that the light
can be aimed at a specific spot, if desired. The lights will
remain on until the switch is pressed a second time, so be
sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle.
They will not turn off automatically. Interior lighting also
comes on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
There is a second light located midway back in the
headliner.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Interior Dome Lamp
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch low-speed wiper operation, or to the HI position for
on the control lever. The lever is located on the high-speed wiper operation.
right side of the steering column.
Changing Wiper Speeds
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the park
position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
are operating. The wipers will resume operation when then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again.
interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle
CAUTION!
every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles.
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
Changing Intermittent Settings
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for Mist Feature
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
the intermittent interval previously selected.
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
wipers will continue to operate.
the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe
cycles and then turn off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Headlights With Wipers Feature
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if
they were turned on by this feature.
Mist Control
The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic To Set A Desired Speed
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
vehicle set speed.
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
To Activate
operate at the selected speed.
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise speed and on level ground before pressing the SET
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be button.
turned off when not in use.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
WARNING!
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
You could lose control and have an accident. Always speed memory.
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed will be established.
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
To Accelerate For Passing
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
increase until the button is released, then the new set
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
speed will be established.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
vehicle set speed.
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
moderate hills is normal.
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differControl.
ent HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- indicator flashes.
rity Alarm is active.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
ter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the fre- activates, programming is complete.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
On some garage door openers/devices there may be a To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is follow these steps:
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indithe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the frerelease the button.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programboth buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
to rapid.
steps.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
and observe the indicator light.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programbefore 1995.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
pressed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
follow these steps:
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
door or gate motor.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
release the button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain- away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
ing steps.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigtrained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door follow these steps:
may open and close while you are programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
and observe the indicator light.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
pressed.
follow all remaining steps.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
Using HomeLink姞
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
To operate, press and release the programmed
NOT erase the channels.
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lightprogramming, plug it back in at this time.
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Security
Troubleshooting Tips
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
in your vehicle.
are some of the most common solutions:
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
erased.
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof controls are mounted between the dome/
reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
Pinch Protect Feature
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is windows down, or the sunroof (if so equipped) is in
certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal
pressed.
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
Venting Sunroof — Express
with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the suncalled “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
Sunroof Maintenance
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
Sunshade Operation
the glass panel.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
open.
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
Wind Buffeting
is turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of feature.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by
a fuse.
Instrument Panel Power Outlet
The instrument panel power outlet, located below the NOTE: To preserve the heating element, do not hold the
climate control knobs, has power available only when the lighter in the heating position.
ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a A second power outlet is located inside the center conconventional cigar lighter unit.
sole.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
The center console power outlet is powered directly from
the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged
into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob
and element must be used.
Center Console
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #16 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
2 — #11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
An optional ash receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will fit in the center console front
cupholder.
The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter
that can be used with the power outlets. Refer to “Power
Outlets” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders located in the center console
for the front passengers.
Front Cupholders
Rear Seat Bottle Holder
There are built-in bottle holders located in both rear door
trim panels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
STORAGE
Glovebox Storage Compartment
The glovebox storage compartment is located on the right
side of the instrument panel.
3
Rear Bottle Holder
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Glovebox Storage Compartment
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pull on the handle to open the glovebox.
comfort. The center console can be used for storage and
is also equipped with an electrical power outlet. Refer to
“Power Outlets” in “Understanding The Feature of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Opened Glovebox
CONSOLE FEATURES
Storage
Center Console
The center console is located between the front driver
Two separate storage compartments are also located
and passenger seats. The center console armrest slides
underneath the armrest.
forward from design position to provide added user
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
NOTE:
• A notch in the front of the console base allows for use
of a cellular phone while it is plugged into the power
outlet with the armrest latched down.
• The power outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in
the optional cup holder ash receiver.
WARNING!
Center Console Storage
The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen
and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will
hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet. The console’s front opening
lid allows for easy access to these compartments.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier
objects as low and as far forward as possible. Place as
much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much
weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the
rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
3
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Ski Pass-Through
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door.
Ski Pass-Through
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Oil Change Required — If Equipped . . . . . . 210
䡵 Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ EVIC Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
䡵 Instrument Cluster — R/T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
䡵 Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Tire PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ EVIC Units Selection (Units In Display) . . . . 216
▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . 216
䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 219
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 238
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 227
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 229
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 239
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 247
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 268
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 257
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 257
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 262
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e.,
CD) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
. . . . . . . 272
4
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . 273
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlet
— Side Window Demister Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Passenger Airbag
Glove Compartment
Heated Seat Switch — If Equipped
Hazard Switch
9 — Power Outlet
10 — Climate Controls
11 — Ignition Switch
12 — Trunk Release Button
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — R/T
4
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
1. Temperature Gauge
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaas a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
ture. Any reading below the red mark of the gauge shows
from the engine cooling system.
that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The
gauge pointer may show a higher than normal tempera- 2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in
located on the left side of the vehicle.
heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
3. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
4. Speedometer
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
kilometers per hour (km/h).
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to approximately 2.0 gal- Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
lons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light and a
7. Air Bag Warning Light
single chime will sound.
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
approximately 3.0 gallons of fuel is added.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
6. Charging System Light
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
This light shows the status of the electrical chargdealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
ing system. The light should come on briefly when
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a
further information.
bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices, 8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster.
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
authorized dealer.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will
4
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant 10. Engine Temperature Warning Light
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
Vehicle” for further information.
gauge approaches H , this indicator will illuminate
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperalight will come on and remain on when the
ture gauge to pass H , the indicator will continuously
ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON/RUN
flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine
position, and the light will turn off after the engine is
is allowed to cool.
started. If the bulb does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vethe vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine. service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
This can be determined using the procedure shown in Do In Emergencies” for further information.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, sary.
including brake fluid level and parking brake
WARNING!
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerthe brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
the anti-lock brake system.
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
dropped below a specified level.
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condithe ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
approximately three seconds. The light should then turn
the brake fluid level checked.
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light PARK.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
14. Odometer Display/Trip Odometer Display
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is The odometer display shows the total distance the veapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- hicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require
that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify
tion.
to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer
reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If
12. Tachometer
The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a
good idea for you to make a record of the odometer
prevent engine damage.
reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure
13. Shift Lever Indicator
that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then
push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately two seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional information.
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then all warnings including ”Low Tire,” “Door Ajar” and
“Trunk Ajar” will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for specific messages).
LoW tirE
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
When the appropriate conditions exist, the odometer will display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
display the following messages:
cycles.
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
dECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Ajar
LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
CHANgE OIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
HOTOIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Temperature
Exceeds Safe Threshold
HOTOIL
When this message is displayed there is a engine oil
over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs,
the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odometer along with a chime.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In
Emergencies”.
4
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change
in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose,
improperly installed, or damaged, the words “gASCAP”
will display in the odometer display area. If this occurs,
tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the “gASCAP” message.
(Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information). If
the problem continues, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer
service center as soon as possible.
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times
CHANgE OIL
within 10 seconds.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
4. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle 17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
Information Center (EVIC)”.
problem is detected, the light will come on
15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
while the engine is running. If the light remains
This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed
lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be
Control System is ON.
drivable and not need towing, however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
Trip Odometer
Press and release this button to change the display from
odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it a second time
to change the display to “Trip B.” Press and release it a
third time to change the display back to the odometer.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
require towing. Immediate service is required.
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. This is
that you want to reset, “Trip A” or “Trip B.” Then push normal. If the light does not come on during starting,
and hold the button (approximately two seconds) until have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
the display resets to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be
in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
18. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
16 seconds when the alarm system is arming.
lights or headlights are turned on.
The light will begin to flash slowly indicating
that the system is armed. The light will stop
flashing when the vehicle is disarmed.
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
22. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
This light indicates the Electronic Stability ConMalfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driver.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
20. Turn Signal Indicators
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Inturn signal, when using the turn signal lever. A
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
for a defective outside light bulb.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see 24. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
should be checked monthly when cold and
problem diagnosed and corrected.
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
NOTE:
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mohas tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
ON/RUN.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC tires.)
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
that caused the ESC activation.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
23. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
lights are on.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
to continue to function properly.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that
monitors emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when
the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the key from
LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
26. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the ABS. This light will
come on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON/RUN position and may stay on for approximately three seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to
assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key
to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light
should come on. If the light does not come on, have the
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the
light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED
The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information
and temperature display.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
28. High Beam Indicator
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped
This display shows the EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Buttons
RESET Button
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then press and hold the RESET button
located on the steering wheel.
The following displays can be reset or changed:
• Trip A
• Trip B
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instrument cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
Trip A
STEP Button
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to reset.
scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip FuncTrip B
tions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
The EVIC consists of the following:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
• Compass Heading Display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE,
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) feaSW)
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
• Mileage (Avg/MPG)
instrument cluster.
• Miles To Empty
• Low Tire Information (Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) Displays) — if equipped
• Timer
• Units
• System Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.)
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Outside Temperature Display (°F or °C)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Audio Mode Displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD
Title and Track number when playing
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Press and release the MENU button to advance
the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu
features. Upon reaching the last item in the
MENU Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first
Button item in the Main Menu with the next MENU
button press and release.
Press and release the DOWN button to advance
the display through the various Trip Functions
or Personal Settings.
DOWN
Button
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
Press and release the COMPASS button to
display the compass heading, the outside
temperature, and Audio Info (when the raCOMPASS dio is on) screen when the current screen is
not the compass, outside temp, audio info
Button
screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
Press and release the SELECT Button to accept • Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
a selection. The SELECT Button also resets
chime)
various Trip Functions.
• RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a
SELECT
single chime)
Button
• Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle Not In PARK
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle in Motion
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door
the following messages:
is open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
after one mile traveled)
• Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
• Trunk Open (with vehicle graphic showing an open
trunk and A single chime )
• Lights On
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Key In Ignition
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Remote start aborted — Trunk ajar
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Remote start disabled — System fault
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
• Low Tire (with a graphic of the car showing which
tire(s) is/are low - with a single chime). Refer to ⬙Tire
Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙.
Oil Change Required — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
perform the following procedure:
• Check TPM System (with a single chime) Refer to ⬙Tire
Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
Operating⬙.
start the engine.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times •
within 10 seconds.
•
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
•
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
•
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
•
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
EVIC Main Menu
To step to each main menu feature press and release the
MENU button once for each step. A step from the last
item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list
to be displayed. The following features are in the Main
menu:
Tire Pressure Status display
Elapsed Time
EVIC Units Selection
System Status
Personal Settings
NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset
(Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time), the EVIC
prompts a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the
word RESET next to it.
When the SELECT button is pressed, the selected feature
will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the
• Compass, Outside Temperature, Audio Information (if SELECT button graphic. Pressing SELECT a second time
radio is on) display
will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time.
After three seconds without pressing SELECT, RESET
• Average Fuel Economy
ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature
• Distance to Empty
will have been reset.
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Display
The compass heading indicates the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight
COMPASS compass headings, the outside temperature,
and audio information (if the radio is on) if
Button
the EVIC display is not already displaying
this screen.
EVIC will flash the “CAL” indicator until the compass is
calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing
one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside etc.
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
Manual Compass Calibration
be driven several minutes before the updated temperaIf the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manudisplayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
compass:
Automatic Compass Calibration
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
need to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Calibrate
panel. This is where the compass module is located and
Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC.
such devices may interfere and cause false compass
4. Press and release the SELECT button and the “CAL” readings.
indicator will start flashing.
4
5. Drive the vehicle slowly (under 5 mph / 8 km/h),
completing one or more circles (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns
off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
Compass Variance Map
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Change Compass Variance:
Average Fuel Economy
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and
shift lever in PARK.
holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
display). Upon reset, the history information will be
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel
3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Compass average reading before the reset.
Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in the
Distance To Empty (DTE)
EVIC.
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
4. Press and release the SELECT button to increment the
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update),
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
map.
tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) • If the Tire Pressure System requires service, ⬙Check
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
TPM System⬙ is displayed. Tire PSI is an information
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL”. This display will
only function and cannot be reset.
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
Elapsed Time
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
Tire PSI
in the RUN or START position.
Press and release the MENU button until ⬙Tire PSI⬙ is
displayed.
Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
Tire pressure information is displayed as follows:
hours:minutes:seconds
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires, TIRE and a vehicle Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the
graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon
corner or the graphic.
reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start
incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or
• If one or more tires have low pressure, LOW TIRE and
START.
a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure
values in each corner of the graphic. Tire pressure
values that are too low will be flashing.
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display)
Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty and Tire
features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK.
Pressure features. Press and Release the SELECT button
Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
to toggle units between ⬙U.S.⬙ and ⬙METRIC⬙.
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
System Status
Press and release the DOWN button to display the
Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning
following programmable features:
Messages stored. Pressing and releasing the DOWN
button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing. Language
Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are When in this display you may select different languages
active Warning Messages stored. Pressing and releasing for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRES- Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects
ENT is displayed will display each stored warning for English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch deeach button press. Press and Release the MENU button to pending on availability. As you continue, the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
return to the Main Menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Auto Unlock on Exit
When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the
driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press the
SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
RKE Unlock
When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with
Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
Flash Lamp with Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until ON or OFF appears.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
the SELECT button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds appears.
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headlamps With Wipers
(Available with Auto Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press the SELECT button until ON or OFF
appears.
Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature.
To make your selection, press the SELECT button until
Off, 45 sec., 5 min., or 10 min. appears.
Illumin. Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press the SELECT button until
“OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
Display Units In
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
and Metric units of measure. To make your selection,
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
press and release the SELECT button until “U.S.” or
Key-Off Power Delay
“METRIC” appears.
When this feature is selected, the power window
Compass Variance
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), and Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
side of the radio faceplate.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 230 (REQ)
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
SCAN Button
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for details.
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
TIME Button
Equipped
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
and frequency display.
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command in the Uconnect™
User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Clock Setting Procedure
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
SCROLL control knob.
RW/FF
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
will begin to blink.
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
knob to save the time change.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
step 2.
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be sePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Music Type information.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
treble tones.
format types:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
No program type or
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
None
undefined
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Classical
Classicl
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
College
College
the front and rear speakers.
Country
Country
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Foreign Language
Language
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
16-Digit Character Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Program Type
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between • The available selections for each of the above entries
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
varies depending upon the disc.
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
• These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
will display the following:
OFF (if equipped).
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are • VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
available on the disc (if equipped).
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will • VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
the disc) (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set Subtitle Language — If Equipped
defaults according to customer preference.
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
Menu Language — If Equipped
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
to select the number and then push to select.
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/ Subtitles — If Equipped
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
number and then push to select.
Off or On.
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU and press and release that button. If a button is not
button on the remote control to select desired title to play. selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
CAUTION!
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
position to operate the radio.
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
reading the disc.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CAUTION!
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
player mechanism.
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
CD currently playing.
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
TIME Button (CD MODE)
following restrictions.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
RW/FF (CD MODE)
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
works in a similar manner.
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
character extension)
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
character extension)
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
WMA
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
WMA
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
increase with more files and folders
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
supported by the radios.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
supported.
before writing to the disc.
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilINFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from Manual located on the DVD for further details.
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
display for five seconds.
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)™” for furRW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
ther details.
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
DTS™
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The- information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
ater Systems, Inc.
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast- Number (ESN/SID)
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to Please have the following information available when
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite calling:
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. Number (ESN/SID).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi- on or above the antenna.
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
Reception Quality
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
following reasons:
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on • The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
the radio to exit this screen.
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
form of short audio mutes.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
cause signal blockage.
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
ACC position to operate the radio.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
SEEK Buttons
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next to normal display).
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
RW/FF
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
direction of the arrows.
without stopping until you release it.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
button a second time.
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
type.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type and press and release that button. If a button is not
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butchannel with the same selected Music Type name.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
SETUP Button
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
following items:
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
button number will display.
Sirius subscription.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons 1 - 6
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
side of the radio faceplate.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Media Center 130 (RES)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
position to operate the radio.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the another selection. Holding either button will bypass
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second stations without stopping, until you release it.
time to turn off the radio.
TIME Button
Electronic Volume Control
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 and radio frequency.
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
Clock Setting Procedure
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
volume, and to the left decreases it.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
set at the same volume level as last played.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
knob to save time change.
mid-range tones.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
RW/FF
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
AM or FM frequencies.
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
AM/FM Button
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to pressing the pushbutton twice.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
button number will display.
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button Buttons 1 - 6
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
button works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SEEK Button
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea- available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
TIME Button
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under- and radio frequency.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Clock Setting Procedure
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
will begin to blink.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
knob to save time change.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
procedure, starting at Step 2.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be sePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Music Type information.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
treble tones.
format types:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
No program type or
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
None
undefined
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Classical
Classicl
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
College
College
the front and rear speakers.
Country
Country
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Foreign Language
Language
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
16-Digit Character Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Program Type
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SEEK Button
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanPress this button to change the display from a large CD dom Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilRadio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilNOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
limited coverage in Alaska.
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
System Activation
down.
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Number (ESN/SID)
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
Please have the following information available when mode.
calling:
Satellite Antenna
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
Number (ESN/SID).
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
ESN/SID Access
on or above the antenna.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
SEEK Buttons
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons:
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
structure or under a physical obstacle.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the without stopping until you release it.
form of short audio mutes.
SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
cause intermittent reception.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
button a second time.
cause signal blockage.
INFO Button
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa(Satellite) Mode
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
ACC position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
additional three seconds will make the radio display the Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return type.
to normal display).
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
direction of the arrows.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SETUP Button
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
MUSIC TYPE Button
following items:
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
seconds will allow the program format type to be seSirius subscription.
lected.
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
an option with these radios.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
plugged into the USB port, located in the center of the Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
instrument panel below the climate controls.
located in the center of the instrument panel below the
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
climate controls.
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
USB Connector Port
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to • The audio device can be controlled using the radio
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
pressing radio switches, as described below.
audio device)
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely disControlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
Using Radio Buttons
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
Using This Feature
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
USB port:
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Play Mode
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
the current track.
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
USB device and display data:
holding the FF >> button.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
previous track.
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
seconds.
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
Track⬙.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
each track in the current list and then forward to the
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
device or external USB device.
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockSCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previthe track detail on the radio display. Once the track
ous and next tracks.
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as • LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
external USB device.
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
• Preset 1 – Playlists
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
• Preset 2 – Artists
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
• Preset 3 – Albums
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 4 – Genres
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
music on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. The left and right controls
are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in the center
of each switch. Reach behind the steering wheel to access
the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Right-Hand Switch Functions
• Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
• Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next
track.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to change
• Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation
beginning of the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins to play.
• Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
• Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
station up from the current setting.
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
• Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
and so forth.
listenable station down from the current setting.
• Press the button located in the center of the switch to
• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to
change to the next preset that you have programmed.
the next preset that you have programmed.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions:
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
too high.
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are four blower
speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Manual Temperature Control
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Temperature Control
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to regulate the temRotate this control to choose from sevperature of the air inside the passenger
eral patterns of air distribution. You
compartment. Rotating the dial left
can select either a primary mode as
into the blue area of the scale indicates
identified by the symbols on the concooler temperatures, while rotating
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
right into the red area indicates
The closer the setting is to a particular
warmer temperatures.
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con- Panel
denser located in front of the radiator for an accumulaAir is directed through the outlets in the instrument
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there Defrost
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxilower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but mum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
cool conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
small amount flowing through the defrost and side Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
window demist outlets.
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
temporarily put the system in recirculation
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
mode. This can be used when outside condithe windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
tions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause
the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten
minutes, the system will return to normal mode function
and the LED will turn off.
Floor
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Air Conditioning Control
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Press this button to engage the Air
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating right into
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
the red area indicates warmer temwhen the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
peratures.
control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
• Recirculated air is not allowed in Floor, Mix or Defrost NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
modes. If the Recirculation button is depressed while until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
in any of these modes, the LED indicator will flash • MAX A/C
several times then go out. Recirculation will be dis- For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
abled automatically is these modes are selected.
buttons at the same time.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
• ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
Automatic Temperature Control
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE:
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
air conditioning is not necessary.
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
• While operating in AUTO, the system will not autorotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
matically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the
windshield. The defrost mode must be manually se- NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
lected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Operation Chart that follows for details.
Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation, turn the
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
mode there are seven blower speeds
that can be individual selected. In off
position the blower will shut off.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument • Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Bi-Level
• Defrost
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there mum blower and temperature settings for best windis a difference in temperature between the upper and shield and side window defrosting.
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
• Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will temporarily put the system
in recirculation mode. This can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause
the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten
minutes, the system will return to normal AUTO mode
function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode
is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or Mix mode in order
to improve window clearing. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
Mix mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in
these modes will cause the LED in the control button
to blink and then turn off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Mix and then press the
Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
Operating Tips
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
suggested control settings for various weather condi- fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
tions.
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Mix
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid
weather.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
long periods as fogging may occur.
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pasSide Window Demisters
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
intervals.
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 297
▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
5
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 325
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 335
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 350
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 361
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
5
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Loose Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 366
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 371
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 376
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Towing This Vehicle
Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Recreational Towing – All Models . . . . . . . . 384
5
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position,
and you must press the brake pedal before shifting out of
PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start (Four-Speed
Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
For vehicles equipped with Tip Start (Six-Speed Trans- If Engine Fails To Start
mission), turn the ignition switch to the START position
WARNING!
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage auto• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
matically when the engine is running. If the engine fails
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 secstart the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
onds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
causing serious personal injury.
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
Starting” procedure.
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transExtreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or ⫺29°C)
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availengine has started, ignite and damage the converter
able from your dealer) is recommended.
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Without Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures.
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
CAUTION!
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
15 seconds before trying again.
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
enough power to continue running when the key is repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the
floor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
CAUTION!
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine.
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
CAUTION!
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
Damage to the transmission may occur if the followgrounded, three-wire extension cord.
ing precautions are not observed:
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Intea complete stop.
grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of
(Continued)
the vehicle.
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing on the brake pedal.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your foot is firmly
pressing on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
children unattended inside a vehicle.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
Systems
These systems prevent the key fob from being removed
unless the shift lever is in PARK. They also prevent
shifting out of PARK unless the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position and the brake pedal is applied.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position
and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK
position unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift
lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
be turned to the ON/RUN or START position (engine vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Four-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a range.
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
parking brake.
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
hundred miles (kilometers).
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing
the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never
leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
The following indicators should be used to ensure that periods with the engine running. The engine may be
you have placed the shift lever into the PARK position: started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), select the ⬙3⬙ range. Under
these conditions, using the ⬙3⬙ range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
DRIVE and “3” range shift points. This is done to prevent
transmission damage due to overheating.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to second gear only. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
DRIVE 3
This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear. The transmission will operate normally in first and second gear.
Shifts into third may be delayed to provide second gear
operation at higher speeds. Using the ⬙3⬙ range while
operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. The ⬙3⬙
range should also be used when descending steep grades
to avoid brake system distress.
LOW
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for maximum engine braking,
and upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in second gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the required.
following steps:
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
1. Stop the vehicle.
controlled Overdrive (fourth gear). The transmission will
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position. ing conditions are present:
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
5. Restart the engine.
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • the engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature,
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is • vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
recommended that you visit your authorized dealer at
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the
problem could recur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) — If
Equipped
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.
This is normal. Shifting between the DRIVE and 3 ranges,
when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of
Overdrive.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick威 shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick威 shift control
(refer to “AutoStick威” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information). Moving the shift lever to the left or
right (-/+) while in the AutoStick威 position (below the
Drive position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing
the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never
leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
WARNING!
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with engine running. The engine may be started
in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condionce the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
level.
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威 mode
(refer to “AutoStick威” in “Starting And Operating” for Transmission Limp Home Mode
further information) to select a lower gear range. Under Transmission function is monitored electronically for
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
performance and extend transmission life by reducing result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive
sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission service is required.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
Overdrive Operation
following steps:
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
1. Stop the vehicle.
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
ing conditions are present:
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no • the engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature,
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.
This is normal. Using the AutoStick威 feature, when the
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that
the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive feature providing
manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick威 position (below
the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side.
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-)
triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The
gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the
transmission range indicator.
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will only • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is enshift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to
gaged.
the right (+) or left (-), or as described below.
• The transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick威 is
AutoStick威 is deactivated when the shift lever is shifted
engaged.
from the AutoStick (+/-) position into the DRIVE
position.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
General Information
• You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except sixth. • If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed,
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
of a vehicle speed.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
• If a ratio other than first gear is selected, and the
vehicle is brought to a stop, the transmission control
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
logic will automatically select the first gear ratio.
• If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威 mode and the transmission will return to
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
conditions. To select second gear after the vehicle is
brought to a stop, tap the shift lever to the right (+)
once.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steerThe standard power steering system will give you good
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
steering capability if power assist is lost.
does not in any way damage the steering system.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
Parking Brake
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake
(ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required. See your authorized dealer.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related
motor noises. These noises are the system performing its
self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working
properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is
started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• brake pedal pulsations,
• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System
(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
and are commonly referred to as ESC.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual.
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and Brake Assist System (BAS)
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensOperating” for further information.
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
Traction Control System (TCS)
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brakstability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
deactivated.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ESC Operating Modes
All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC
operating modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial ESC Mode
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank below the
heater/air conditioning controls). When in “Partial Off”
mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC
function normally, with the exception of engine power
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
reduction. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to operation.
gain traction.
WARNING!
In partial ESC mode, the engine power reduction
feature of ESC is disabled. Therefore, enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
ESC Off Switch
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five NOTE:
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
[295 kg]).
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
calculated in Step 4.
(392 kg).
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Information” section of this manual.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
consumption.
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial-Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxiSpare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
Wheel – If Equipped
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
75 mph (120 km/h).
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
pattern.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipthe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempodriver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
80D18 103M.
with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equiptire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or icy conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for It is recommended you contact your original equipment
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proSNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the checked before using these tire types.
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only different loads and perform different steering, driving,
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
safety and handling of your vehicle.
unequal rates.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.”
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
the tire.
message will be displayed for a minimum of five
Base System
seconds and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
in one or more of the four active road tires. Should this
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
readings to the Receiver Module.
pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the pressures, the system will automatically update and the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and ⬙LOW
and to maintain the proper pressure.
TIRE⬙ message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
The TPMS consists of the following components:
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
• Receiver Module
Check TPMS Warning
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sensors.
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn ON and a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be dis2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
played for a minimum of five seconds.
that affects radio wave signals.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
housings.
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in indicate which sensor is not being received.
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
The EVIC will also display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure
values are still being received from the TPM sensors but
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
The system still needs to be serviced as long as the
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
sensors.
NOTE:
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
that affects radio wave signals.
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
housings.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “Tire Pressure
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime will the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure
value in the graphic display.
value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a
TPMS to receive this information.
⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
pressure value.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
following conditions:
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, • This device may not cause harmful interference.
and the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
• This device must accept any interference received,
message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
including interference that may cause undesired
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
operation.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experifollowing licenses:
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S18002015B Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267T-S180015B endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the WorldFUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are speLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at prove air quality.
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
CAUTION!
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold driveability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
E-85 perform the following:
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• change the engine oil and oil filter
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor• disconnect and reconnect the battery
nia reformulated gasoline.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
Materials Added To Fuel
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
exposure to E-85 fuel.
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT In Gasoline
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
(Continued)
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
E-85 Fuel Cap
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with • When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
you may experience hard starting and rough idle
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
following start up even if the above recommendations
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
are followed.
avoided.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
than 1/4 full
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
Techron may be used.
refueling
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formua period of at least 5 minutes
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer reduring warm up.
quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear
quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
Fuel Filler Door
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
vehicle.
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Tether Cable
WARNING!
NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
(Continued)
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
in violation of most state and federal fire regula- “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument
tions and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on. cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the message. If the problem persists, the message will
the ground while filling.
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
NOTE:
in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. problem will turn the MIL off.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn VEHICLE LOADING
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
Vehicle Certification Label
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
refueled.
of the driver’s door.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
WARNING! (Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
hicles used for trailer towing.
further information.
If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing
this section, please consult your dealer to for full details Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than or more than 10% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
given drivetrain.
your vehicle.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings
Engine/Transmission
Max. Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note 1)
100 lbs (45 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)
2.4L/Auto
See Note 2
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
3.6L/Auto
22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m)
2,000 lbs (900 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Note 1: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer
to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Note 2: Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields/guards are not recommended for use with
all four-cylinder engines with automatic transmission. Please see your authorized dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
CAUTION!
Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended
frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or
cause severe engine damage under extreme conditions.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause
the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause Consider the following items when computing the
loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer • The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
collisions.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
put in or on your vehicle.
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and
Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Incorrect trailer tongue weight could result in increased yaw or vehicle instability. A negative trailer
tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of
the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability. Negative
trailer tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat
and potentially become disengaged from the tow
vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
(Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
(Continued)
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve 10% of trailer tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on tread wear indicators and for proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement
Towing Requirements – Tires
procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carry• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
ing capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
spare tire.
GAWR limits.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper- • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation prespersonal injury.
sures before trailer usage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes with adequate
braking capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in a collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working
maintenance intervals.
properly — including hazard flashers.
NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transmission
Automatic Transmission
fluid level before towing. Six-speed transmissions do not
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. Howrequire a fluid level check before towing. If, however, you
ever, if frequent shifting occurs, select the ⬙3⬙ range (for a
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see
four-speed automatic) or select a lower gear using the
your authorized dealership service center for assistance.
AutoStick威 shift control.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
• City Driving
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transyou can get back to cruising speed.
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
• Highway Driving
maximize fuel efficiency.
Reduce speed.
5
• Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
All Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing – All Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
▫ Automatic Transmission
(4-Speed, And 6-Speed 62TE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
6
386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — Slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only) — If
an impending overheat condition:
Equipped
During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
long grades on a hot day, the engine oil temperature may
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) until the engine oil
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control temperature is reduced.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat NOTE: The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of
53 mph (85 km/h). You may of course, reduce your
from the engine cooling system.
vehicle speed further if needed.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
6
388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the trunk.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
WARNING! (Continued)
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of
Tires--General Information--for information about the
spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
Jack Warning Label
6
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in Step 3.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Jacking Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393
3. There is a front and rear jacking location on each side
of the vehicle.
6
Rear Jacking Location
Front Jacking Location
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel
covers (where applicable) off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Mounting Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
WARNING!
• To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in personal injury.
• To avoid possible personal injury, handle the
wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any
sharp edges.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have tightened
the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have
the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
the tire pressure as required.
6
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
nuts.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
WARNING!
seated against the wheel.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
result in personal injury.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
nuts.
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
6
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
handle counterclockwise.
precautions.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
CAUTION!
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the
other booster source with a system voltage greater
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
alternator or electrical system may occur.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Preparations For Jump-Start
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
6
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Locking Tab
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
charged battery.
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
6
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi- front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure
to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
wheels, is most effective.
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), turn the system to Partial OFF
before attempting to “rock” the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the cupholder liner.
6
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position 6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
without starting the engine.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
8. Reinstall the cupholder liner.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the hole at the
front of the cupholder and push and hold the override
release lever forward.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Rear
Front
ALL
4-SPEED, 6-SPEED (62TE) TRANSMISSIONS
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent equipment designed for the purpose, following equipdamage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not
the LOCK or ACC positions.
Automatic Transmission
(4-Speed, and 6-Speed 62TE)
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
(Continued) four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
6
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 mi (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
mi (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels OFF
the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flatbed towing is
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on
the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will
occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front
wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 411
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
7
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Cleaning Center Console Cupholders . . . . . . 444
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 456
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “GASCAP” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap
until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
“Reset” button to turn off the message. If the problem
7
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- crank or start the engine.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one
quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the
range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of
the range marking.
7
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
Change Engine Oil
been certified by the American
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
Petroleum Institute (API). The
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
manufacturer only recommends
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
API Certified engine oils.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating
temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.4L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certistarting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numcap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for ber should not be used.
your vehicle.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartengine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informament” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- tion.
tion.
7
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi- station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
Materials Added To Engine Oils
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replaceDo not add any supplemental materials, other than leak ment. The quality of replacement filters varies considerdetection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
engineered product and it’s performance may be im- most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high
paired by supplemental additives.
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind
the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergenmaintenance intervals.
cies” for further information.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the inner fender shield.
7
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the
door.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System 3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres- on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the
sor Oil, and Refrigerants.
dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the
end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand.
maintenance intervals.
Once disconnected, the dampener will retract underneath the instrument panel if you release it.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
4. Pivot the glove box downward.
5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
CAUTION!
The A/C Air Filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to install the filter properly will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
7
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Make sure that they are not frozen to the
glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the
blade.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum
products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located
in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
(Continued) intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
7
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
the vehicle is operated.
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Coolant Level
Four-Cylinder Engines – the coolant bottle provides a
quick visual method for determining that the engine
coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine
idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown
on the bottle.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
Six-Cylinder Engines – the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be
between the “COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle
when the engine is cold.
7
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
from the front of the engine compartment. This is norsystem should be pressure tested for leaks.
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
mileage, and increased emissions.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system failBrake System
ure.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper forming underhood services.
maintenance intervals.
7
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
(Continued)
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
7
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will require
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
Fluid Level Check – Four-Speed Automatic
comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
Transmission
Use the following procedure to check the automatic temperature below 80° F (27° C).
transmission fluid level properly:
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
remove dipstick and note the reading.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of
60 seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position ending with the lever in PARK.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
the possibility of dirt entering the transmission.
overfill.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180° F (82° C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
7
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause
serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from
entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
re-seated properly.
Fluid Level Check – Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer
serviced only.
Transmission Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme Washing
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehave an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underhicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivabody protection.
lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumuresistance built into your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
What Causes Corrosion?
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
The most common causes are:
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Stone and gravel impact.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
finish.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
a month.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
and open.
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Special Care
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folCAUTION!
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
7
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Interior Care
Equipped
Instrument Panel Cover
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manThe instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
ner:
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting use protectants or other products, which may cause
with a clean, dry towel.
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Cleaning Interior Trim
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivacloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
remove soap residue.
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and clean vinyl upholstery.
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
soap residue.
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of mended for leather upholstery.
protectants on Stain Repel products.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
7
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may Cleaning Center Console Cupholders
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
Removal
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift
rag.
upward.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning
Seat Belt Maintenance
Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Installation
buckles do not work properly.
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
FUSES
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed on the inside
of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for FUSES/TIPM
location.
Integrated Power Module
Cavity
1
2
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
—
Mini
Fuse
Description
—
Power Top Module –
If Equipped
20 Amp
Yellow
AWD Module
7
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
3
—
10 Amp
Red
4
—
5
—
Cavity
6
—
7
—
8
—
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
Description
Center High
Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL)/Brake
Switch
Ignition Switch
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
Power Mirror
Switch/Climate
Controls
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 1
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 2
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
9
40 Amp
Green
10
—
20 Amp
Yellow
11
—
15 Amp
Lt Blue
12
—
13
—
14
—
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Battery Feed – Power
Seats – If Equipped/
PZEV Air Pump – If
Equipped
Instrument Panel/
Power Locks/Interior
Lights
Selectable Power
Outlet (Inside Center
Arm Rest)
—
Ignition
Instrument Panel
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Cavity
15
16
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
—
Mini
Fuse
—
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
17
—
10 Amp
Red
18
40 Amp
Green
—
19
—
20
—
21
—
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
22
—
10 Amp
Red
23
—
24
—
25
—
10 Amp
Red
26
—
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Cavity
Radiator Fan Relay
Cigar Lighter/
Sunroof – If
Equipped
Wireless Control
Module (WCM)/
Clock/Steering Control Module (SCM)
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay
Audio Amplifier – If
Equipped
Radio
Siren – If Equipped
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Ignition Run – Climate Controls/Hot
Cupholder – If
Equipped
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 3
Sunroof – If
Equipped
Ignition Run —
Heated Mirrors - If
Equipped
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 2
7
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
27
28
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
29
—
—
30
—
20 Amp
Yellow
31
—
—
Description
Ignition Run – Occupant Classification
Module (OCM)/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run — Occupant Classification
Module (OCM)/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
Hot Car (No Fuse
Required)
Ignition Run –
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
Spare
Cavity
32
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
—
33
—
10 Amp
Red
34
30 Amp
Pink
—
Description
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 1
Switch Bank/
Diagnostic Link
Connector/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module – If
Equipped/Electronic
Stability Control
(ESC) Module – If
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
35
40 Amp
Green
—
36
30 Amp
Pink
—
37
—
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module – If
Equipped/Electronic
Stability Control
(ESC) Module – If
Equipped
Passenger Door Module (PDM)/Driver
Door Module (DDM)
Power Top Module –
If Equipped
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
7
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
battery.
be used for replacement.
• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb No.
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 578/W5W
• Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp. . . . . . . . . . 578/W5W
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Visor Vanity Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Shift Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IKLE14140
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
possibility of compressor damage when the system is for replacement.
started again.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3457A
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
Front Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WY5W
Center High Mounted Stop
(CHMSL) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
License Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp
1. Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the
headlamp.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the totally integrated power
module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp
on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
2. Reach into engine compartment and from behind the
lamp assembly and grasp the connector.
7
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate bulb and connector 1⁄4 turn and pull outward 4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.
from assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life.
5. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate
clockwise 1⁄4 turn to secure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
Fog Lamps
Backup Lamps
1. Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is 1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner
limited.
behind the tail lamp.
2. Turn the steering wheel to allow access and remove 2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp
the inner fender shield.
housing.
3. Rotate the bulb and connector 1⁄4 turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb off of connector and replace with a new
one.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly outward pushing 4. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
gently on the studs from inside to disengage the lamp
5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
housing.
License Plate Lamp
1. Remove two retaining screws holding the light lens in
place.
2. Gently pry the lamp assembly loose.
3. Pull bulb from socket, replace and reattach the lamp
assembly with the two retaining screws.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines — (Except 2.4L PZEV)
16.9 Gallons
2.4L PZEV (Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle)
18.5 Gallons
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.5 Quarts
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
6 Quarts
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
7.7 Quarts
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
11.6 Quarts
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
64 Liters
70 Liters
4.4 Liters
5.6 Liters
7.3 Liters
11 Liters
7
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine except
ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
PZEV*
Spark Plugs – 2.4L with PZEV*
ZFR5AP (Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm])
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection
87 Octane
* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission –
Four-Speed
Automatic Transmission –
Six-Speed (62TE)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 462
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, whichindicating that an oil change is necessary.
ever comes first.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 461 M
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator At Each Stop For Fuel
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom- • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
damage.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
CAUTION!
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
S
C
H • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
E
operation.
D
U
L
E
S
8
At Each Oil Change
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 M
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465 M
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467 M
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever
comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
96,000 miles (156 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV Valve if necessary.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 469 M
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L PZEV
Engine Only).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
N
T 90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471 M
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
N
T 114 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 473 M
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 478
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 478
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
9
476 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
480 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 481
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
482 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 483
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
484 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
486 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 429
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 419
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284,422
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,422
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273,277,421
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,67
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66,70,86,193
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,64,66,67
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 62,64,67
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,200
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,259
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429,455
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 198,210
INDEX 487
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,457
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 83
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450,451
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,450
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 25 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . 20
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 277
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,292
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,435
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,438
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,438
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,306
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
10
488 INDEX
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,417
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,364
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,272
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,73,78,81
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,78
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,239,248
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,212
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,211
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 262
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,180
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
INDEX 489
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 430
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428,431
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 429,455,456
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Crankcase Ventilation Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,178,444
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,275,281
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,155
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,438
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
10
490 INDEX
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428,456
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,364
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 159
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 207
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,455
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Emergency, In Case of
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,455,456
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,210,416
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,417
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 412
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
INDEX 491
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284,422
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,456
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,453
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,366
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,368
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,455
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 68
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,364
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,425
Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
10
492 INDEX
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,438
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,457
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,457
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,201,453
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,145
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,368
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,456
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,455
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,370,411
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
INDEX 493
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,205
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 150
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 162
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,306
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,127,359
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,374
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,373
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
10
494 INDEX
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,73
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . .
Key, Programming . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . .
Keyless Entry System . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System (Sedan)
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
17
16
15
21
21
12
58
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . 200,453
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . 78
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388,390
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
INDEX 495
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,450
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,147
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66,70,86,193
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 203
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 329
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . 201,350
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,201,453
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,149,200,453
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 192
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,372
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
10
496 INDEX
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,211
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,480
. . . . . 419 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
. . . . . 414
. . . . . 460 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
. . . . . 414
. . 203,412 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,68
. . . . . 481 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . 40,61,62,64,67
. . . . . 152 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Locks
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INDEX 497
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,199
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,210
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,210
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,456
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,210,416
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,456
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,455
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,455
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411,412
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,481
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 335
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
10
498 INDEX
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 174
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,319
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 430
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,145
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 270
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
INDEX 499
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 198,210
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,259
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 49
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,73,81
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,45
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,145
10
500 INDEX
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 429,456
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,239,248
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 284
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,453
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,344,388
Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 159,199
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,319
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Steering Wheel Mounted
Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,180,450
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
INDEX 501
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,339,483
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 58
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 277
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 192,386
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335,336
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 350
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 335
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330,339
10
502 INDEX
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
349
388
345
346
377
373
111
404
376
383
376
111
315
373
383
375
378
377
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Transaxle
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,292
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,435
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 162
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
INDEX 503
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,370,372
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283,450
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 189 Warning Lights
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 262 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,156,425
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,200,453
10
504 INDEX
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,173
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,275,281
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,156
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
12D41-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising